Philips 27PT5445/37 User manual

Add to My manuals
36 Pages

advertisement

Philips 27PT5445/37 User manual | Manualzz
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
L03 English.qxd 5/4/05 4:18 PM Page 1
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
PANEL
11
15
13
16
18
17
23
19
20
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
2
21
22
25
27
28
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
8.
9.
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Caption Control . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
L
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
www.p4c.philips.com
or
call 1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
Serial No.:
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.philips.com
3121 235 22411- English
222
75 Ω
AV Out
1
2
VIDEO
Y
L
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
3
4
5
6
7
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
Video Cable
(Yellow)
OUT
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
Back of Typical VCR
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
VOL
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
Pr
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
3
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
VOL
VOL
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
3, 4, 1, and 2 Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR 3 or
CURSOR 4 to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
1
2
3
4
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
5
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Espanol (Spanish).
6
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
21.
22.
L
1
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75Ω
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 Ω
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
1
AV Out
CVI
1
AV In
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
5
3
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75Ω
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
5
6
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
Press CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll the
Install features until the words
TUNER MODE is highlighted.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Jack Panel Back of TV
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
6
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
L
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
Y
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
OUT
OUT
OUT
Pb
R
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AV Out
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
CVI
AV In
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Video
Cable
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
2
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
Auto Program
Channel
12
Auto Program
Channel
13
Auto Program
Channel
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
14
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
R AUDIO
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
3
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
AV channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
L/Mono
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll the
Install features until the words
AUTO PROGRAM are highlighted.
AV In
Y
Pr
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
Pb
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
OR
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
Y
HELPFUL HINT
1
2
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
L
75
Y
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
SPDIF
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
AUDIO
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
5
13
AV in
CVI
5
75 Ω
VOL
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
3
4
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
OPTICAL
SPDIF
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
1
C
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
3
4
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
USB
IN
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
SPDIF
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
1
2
3
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 Ω
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
change channels until the picture appears.
24
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75Ω
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
2
VIDEO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
20.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
16.
19.
AUDIO
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
15.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
NOTE: Side AV connection has priority
over rear AV connection.
14.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
R
R AUDIO
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
2
AV In
CVI
13.
17.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
1
Back of TV
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
4
T
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
Model No.:
11.
12.
s
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
while with your product.
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
t
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Pb
1
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Read your User Manual first for quick tips that your
using your Philips product more enjoyable. If you have
read your instructions and still need assistance you may
access or our online help at
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Thank you for choosing Philips.
Need help fast?
10.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
31
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
9
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
safetysymbols
LIMITED
WARRANTY
(Panel 30)
26
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Know these
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
1
*Product Safety
Notification
29
24
PANEL INDEX
3
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
*Proof of
Purchase
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
32
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through
the Install features until the words
CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN 4
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT 2
to toggle between ON or OFF. If
ON is selected the channels is skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons. If OFF is selected the
channels is not skipped when scrolling
channels with the CH+ or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the
menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
L03 English.qxd 4/25/05 7:20 PM Page 1
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
PANEL
11
15
13
16
18
17
23
19
20
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
2
21
22
25
27
28
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
8.
9.
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Caption Control . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
L
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
www.p4c.philips.com
or
call 1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
Serial No.:
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.philips.com
3121 235 22411- English
222
75 Ω
AV Out
1
2
VIDEO
Y
L
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
3
4
5
6
7
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
Video Cable
(Yellow)
OUT
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
Back of Typical VCR
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
VOL
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
Pr
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
3
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
VOL
VOL
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
3, 4, 1, and 2 Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR 3 or
CURSOR 4 to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
1
2
3
4
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
5
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Espanol (Spanish).
6
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
21.
22.
L
1
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75Ω
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 Ω
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
1
AV Out
CVI
1
AV In
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
5
3
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75Ω
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
5
6
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
Press CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll the
Install features until the words
TUNER MODE is highlighted.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Jack Panel Back of TV
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
6
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
L
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
Y
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
OUT
OUT
OUT
Pb
R
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AV Out
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
CVI
AV In
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Video
Cable
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
2
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
Auto Program
Channel
12
Auto Program
Channel
13
Auto Program
Channel
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
14
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
R AUDIO
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
3
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
AV channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
L/Mono
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll the
Install features until the words
AUTO PROGRAM are highlighted.
AV In
Y
Pr
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
Pb
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
OR
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
Y
HELPFUL HINT
1
2
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
L
75
Y
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
SPDIF
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
AUDIO
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
5
13
AV in
CVI
5
75 Ω
VOL
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
3
4
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
OPTICAL
SPDIF
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
1
C
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
3
4
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
USB
IN
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
SPDIF
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
1
2
3
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 Ω
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
change channels until the picture appears.
24
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75Ω
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
2
VIDEO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
20.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
16.
19.
AUDIO
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
15.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
The connection lateral AV prefers over
the back AV entry.
14.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
R
R AUDIO
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
2
AV In
CVI
13.
17.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
1
Back of TV
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
4
T
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
Model No.:
11.
12.
s
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
while with your product.
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
t
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Pb
1
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Read your User Manual first for quick tips that your
using your Philips product more enjoyable. If you have
read your instructions and still need assistance you may
access or our online help at
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Thank you for choosing Philips.
Need help fast?
10.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
31
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
9
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
safetysymbols
LIMITED
WARRANTY
(Panel 30)
26
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Know these
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
1
*Product Safety
Notification
29
24
PANEL INDEX
3
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
*Proof of
Purchase
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
32
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to scroll through
the Install features until the words
CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN 4
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT 2
to toggle between ON or OFF. If
ON is selected the channels is skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons. If OFF is selected the
channels is not skipped when scrolling
channels with the CH+ or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the
menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
User Manual
PANEL LAYOUT
Side 1
MODEL
REGISTRATION
INFORMATION
SAFETY
INFO
PANEL
1
COVER
Side 2
LIMITED
WARRANTY
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
2
3
PANEL PANEL
4
5
PANEL PANEL
6
7
14
PANEL PANEL
10
Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed
below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once to ensure:
PANEL
11
15
*Proof of
Purchase
Returning the enclosed card guarantees that your date of purchase
will be on file, so no additional
paperwork will be required from
you to obtain warranty service.
PANEL PANEL PANEL
12
13
16
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
18
17
23
20
25
30
22
27
28
Panel
Sequence
and
Panel Index
PANEL INDEX
Subject
Panel No.
Antenna Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . .1
Audio/Video Connections
AV Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Component Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . .7
Front (Side) Audio/Video Input Jacks . . .5
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
AV Output Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
S-Video Input Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
AutoLock™ Controls
Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Block All Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Block Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Clear All Blocked Channels . . . . . . . . .21
Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Other Blocking Options . . . . . . . . . . .24
TV Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Understanding AutoLock™ . . . . . . . . .18
Automcatically Programming TV . . . . . .13
3
1
2
BASIC TV AND REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Press the VOLUME + button to
increase the sound level, or the
VOLUME – button to lower the
sound level.
1
2 3
4
Press the CHANNEL UP + or
DOWN – button to select TV
channels.
Point the remote control
toward the remote sensor window on the TV when operating
the TV with the remote.
VO
REMOTE CONTROL
o load the supplied batteries
into the remote:
T
L
Back of Remote
1. Remove the battery compartment lid on the back of the
remote.
Battery Compartment
2-AA Batteries
Battery Lid
3. Reattach the battery lid.
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
SLEEP Button
Press the Sleep button to set the TV to automatically turn itself off after a set period of
time. Press repeatedly to select 15, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 180, or 240 minutes.
For Customer Use
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No. __________________________
Serial No. __________________________
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit our World Wide Web Site at http://www.usasupport.philips.com
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO AV In jack on
the back of the TV.
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) AV In jacks on the rear of
the TV.
Connect the VIDEO (yellow)
cable to the VIDEO OUT jack on the
back of the VCR.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to select the AV channel.AV will appear in the upper left
corner on the TV screen.
With the VCR (or accessory device)
ON and a prerecorded tape (CD,
DVD, etc.) inserted, press the PLAY
button to view the tape on the
television.
1
R
Audio Cables
(Red & White)
OUT
R AUDIO
3
L
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
2
4
VCR with
Audio/Video Outputs
5
7
3
4
5
6
Connect the video (yellow)
cable from the Video output on
the Camera (or accessory device)
to the Video (yellow) Input located
on the SIDE of the TV.
For Stereo Devices: Connect the
audio cable (red and white) from
the Audio Left and Right Outputs
on the Camera to the Audio In
(white) jack on the SIDE of the television.
For Mono Devices: Connect one
end of the audio cable from the
Audio Out jack on the device to
the Audio In (white) jack on the
SIDE of the television.
IN
Back of Typical VCR
Connect the AUDIO (red and
white) cables to the AUDIO (left
and right) OUT jacks on the rear of
the VCR.
Turn the VCR (accessory device)
and the TV ON.
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
Turn the TV and the accessory
device ON.
Press the AV button on the
remote control to tune the TV to
the side (or front) input jacks. “AV”
will appear on the TV screen.
Press the PLAY button on
the accessory device to view playback, or to access the accessory
device (camera, gaming unit, etc.).
VOL
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTIONS
A/CH Button (Alternate Channel)
Press to toggle between the last viewed channel
and the channel presently being viewed.
FROWNIE Button
Allows you to delete channels from the “Quadra
Surf” lists for the colored buttons.Works with all
colored buttons.
AUTO PICTURE Button
Press repeatedly to choose from 5 different factory predefined picture settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Picture Menu
Adjustment controls), Movies (for movies), Sports
(for any sporting event),Weak Signal (used when
the signal being received is not great), or
Multimedia (for video games).
VOL
13.
14.
15.
16.
STATUS/EXIT Button
Press to display the current channel number. If the
on-screen menu is displayed, press the Status/Exit
button of remove it from the TV’s screen.
˙, ˝, ˚, and ¸ Buttons
Press to navigate, select, and adjust controls within
the on-screen menu.Also use the CURSOR ˚ or
CURSOR ¸ to activate or deactivate the
EXPAND 4:3 screen formatting control.
CH(annel) + or CH(annel)- Buttons
Press to select channels in ascending or descending
order.
NUMBERED (0-9) Buttons
Press the numbered buttons to select TV channels
or to enter certain values within the on-screen
menu. For single channel entries, press the numbered button for the channel you desire.The TV
will pause for a second or two before changing to
the chosen channel.
NOTE:
This button is dedicated to TIMER features within
certain TV models.This TV does not contain these
TIMER features, therefore the button will have no
functionality when pressed.
11
F
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the MENU button on
the remote control to show the
on-screen menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
though the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button to display the
INSTALL menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸buttons to scroll
through the Install features until
the word LANGUAGE is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT
˙button repeatedly to select
English, Francais (French), or
Español (Spanish).
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
HELPFUL HINT
The Language contol only makes the
TV’s on-screen MENU items appear
in English, Spanish, or French text.
It does not change the other onscreen text features such as Closed
Caption (CC) TV shows.
19.
20.
21.
22.
1
Optional
Headphones
Video
Cable
Note to the CATV system installer: This
reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
1
2
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
Jack Panel of
Accessory
Device
Audio
Cables
4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RIGHT LEFT
2
S-VIDEO
VOL
5
3
BASIC ANTENNA AND CABLE CONNECTIONS
our home’s signal input might come from
a single (75 ohm) round cable, a
Converter Box, or from an antenna. In either
case the connection to the TV is very easy.
1
2
If your Cable TV signal or
Antenna signal is a round cable
(75 ohm) then you're ready to connect to the TV.
If your antenna has flat twinlead wire (300 ohm), you first need
to attach the antenna wires to the
screws on a 300 to 75 ohm adapter.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the Cable TV signal
to the Cable Signal IN(put) plug on
the Converter.
Connect the Cable TV cable or
Antenna cable (or 300 to 75 ohm
adapter) to the 75Ω plug on the TV.
If you have a Cable Converter
Box: Connect the OUT(put) plug
from the Converter to the 75Ω plug
on the TV.
GROUND CLAMP
2
f you cable signal uses a cable box or
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
decoder, follow the easy steps below to comCable Signal IN from the
plete the connection.
Cable Company
Combination
VHF/UHF Antenna
(Outdoor or Indoor)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
S-VIDEO
Pb
AUDIO
R
Pr
300 to 75Ω
Adapter
Back of TV
1
2
75 ⍀
Twin Lead
Wire
3
4
Connect other end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VHS (SVideo) OUT jack on the back of the
VCR.Then connect the other ends
of the AUDIO (red and white)
CABLES to the AUDIO (left and
right) OUT jacks on the rear of the
VCR.
1
2
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
AV Out
CVI
3
4
5
6
1
AV In
Y
L/Mono
R
Pb
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
S-VIDEO
Back of TV
S-Video
Cable
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
ANT/CABLE
OUT
2
2
Round Cable
75Ω
Direct Cable Connection
4
4
VCR or External
Accessory
Device
(with S-Video
Output)
AV out
AV in
CVI
75‰
VIDEO
Y
L
Pb
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Pr
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press Press the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons to
scroll the Install features until the
words TUNER MODE is highlighted.
˙
Press the CURSOR RIGHT˙
button to select either ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode.
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the on-screen menu from the TV’s
screen.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
VOL
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
English
Antenna
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
English
Cable
OR
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
3
4
English
Auto
5
6
Press Press the Press the
˚ or DOWN ¸
CURSOR UP˚
buttons to scroll the Install features until the words AUTO
PROGRAM are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to start the Auto Program
scanning of channels. Auto
Programming will store all available
channels in the TV’s memory then
tune to the lowest available channel when done.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
CVI
AV Out
AV In
6
VIDEO
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
AV in
CVI
VIDEO
Y
L
CVI
AV Out
2
AV In
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
R
Componen
t Video
Cables
(Green,
Blue, Red)
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
COMP VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
AUDIO
Pb
R
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Accessory Device
Equipped with
Component Video
Outputs
Audio
Cables
(Red &
White)
4
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
Back of TV
1
AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTION:
2
S-VIDEO
Pr
3
he Audio/Video Output jacks are great for
recording with a VCR or used to connect
an external audio system for better sound
reproduction.
Pb
AUDIO
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) OUT(PUT) CONNECTIONS
T
Y
L/Mono
1
8
1
Back of TV
Connect one end of the R(ight)
and L(eft) AUDIO jacks on the
TV to the R and L audio input jacks
on your amplifier or sound system.
Set the audio system’s volume to a
normal listening level.
Pb
R
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
1
2
VOL
1
Turn the TV and audio system
ON. To adjust the volume on the
audio system, you will need to
change the volume at the external
audio system, not the television.
R
L
AUX/TV INPUT
PHONO INPUT
2
Back of TV
1
CVI
AV Out
AV In
VIDEO
Connect one end of the yellow
Video Cable to the AV Out VIDEO
plug. Connect the other end to the
VIDEO IN plug on the second VCR.
Connect one end of the red and
white Audio cable from the AV
Out AUDIO L and R plugs on the
TV to the AUDIO IN plugs on the
VCR.
Y
L/Mono
Pb
AUDIO
R
Video
Cable
Turn the Second VCR ON,
insert a VHS tape and it’s ready to
record what’s being viewed on the
TV screen.
Pr
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
14
OUT
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
IN
IN
OUT
2
R AUDIO
2
4
1
2
4
VOL
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
6
3
5
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
Auto Program
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
7
8
9
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
Press the MENU button on the
remote control to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll though
the on-screen menu until the word
INSTALL is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the Install features until the
words CHANNEL EDIT are highlighted.
12
13
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
IN
1st VCR
(refer to panel 4 for
proper connection)
CHANNEL EDIT
hannel Edit makes it easy for you to ADD or
DELETE channels from the list of channels
stored in the TV’s memory.
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
L
IN
3
C
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
ANTENNA
IN
2nd VCR with Audio and
Video Input Jacks
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
S-VIDEO
Audio Cables
(Red and White)
NOTE: Refer to panel number 4 for the
proper hookup of the first VCR. Follow
the instructions on how to tune to the
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
AV1 channel to view a pre-recorded tape.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
AV In
Y
AUDIO
The following steps allow you to
connect a second VCR to record the
program while your watching it.
5
CVI
AV Out
VIDEO
L/Mono
SECOND VCR CONNECTION:
4
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the INSTALL
menu features.
Pr
OPTICAL
SPDIF
AV out
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
Note: Make sure the antenna or cable signal connection has been completed before
AUTO PROGRAM is activated.
OR
Pb
TV
PASSCARD
75Ω
AUTOMATICALLY PROGRAM
Press the Press the CURSOR
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons
UP˚
to scroll through the on-screen
menu until the word INSTALL is
highlighted.
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
Y
AUDIO OUT
USB
IN
R
our TV can automatically set itself for
local area (or Cable TV) channels.This
makes it easy for you to select only the TV
stations in your area when the CHANNEL
(+), (–) buttons are pressed.
1
2
SPDIF
L
Pr
Y
2
4
1
2
4
AUDIO IN
CABLE
IN
TO
TV/VCR
Pb
HELPFUL HINT
Helpful Hints
When CABLE is selected, channels 1125 are available.
When ANTENNA is selected, channels 2-69 are available.
When AUTO is selected, the TV will
automatically set itself to the correct
mode based on the type of signal it
detects when the AUTO PROGRAM
feature is activated.
Jack Panel Back of TV
5
13
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
4
6
75Ω Round
Coaxial Cable
The description for the component video connectors may differ depending on the DVD player
or accessory digital source equipment used (for
example,Y, Pb, Pr;Y, B-Y, R-Y;Y, Cr, Cb). Although
abbreviations and terms may vary, the letters b
and r stand for the blue and red color component signal connectors, and Y indicates the luminance signal. Refer to your DVD or digital
accessory owner’s manual for definitions and
connection details.
HOW TO USE THE TUNER MODE CONTROL
AV in
CVI
5
75
VOL
Now your ready to place a prerecorded video tape in the VCR and
press the PLAY button.
OPTICAL
SPDIF
3
4
5
COMPONENT VIDEO (CVI) INPUT CONNECTIONS
2
Pr
TV
PASSCARD
VIDEO
HELPFUL HINT
1
VIDEO
OUT
L
After using the AutoProgram Control,
press the CH + and – buttons to
scroll through all the channels stored
in the television’s memory.
omponent Video inputs provide for the
highest possible color and picture resolution in the playback of digital signal source
material, such as with DVD players. The
color difference signals (Pb, Pr) and the
luminance (Y) signal are connected and
received separately, which allows for
improved color bandwidth information (not
possible when using composite video or SVideo connections).
Connect the Component (Y, Pb,
Pr) Video OUT jacks from the
DVD player (or similar device) to the
(Y, Pb, Pr) in(put) jack on the TV.
When using the Component Video
Inputs, it is best not to connect a signal to the AV in Video Jack.
Connect the red and white
AUDIO CABLES to the Audio
(left and right) output jacks on the
rear of the accessory device to the
Audio (L and R) AV In Input Jacks
on the TV.
Turn the TV and the DVD (or
digital accessory device) ON.
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons to scroll the
available channels until CVI appears
in the upper left corner of the TV
screen.
Insert a DVD disc into the DVD
player and press the PLAY button on the DVD Player.
Pb
R
3
4
5
3
Press the AV button or the CH
+ or CH – buttons on the remote
to scroll the channels until SVHS
appears in the upper left corner of
the TV screen.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to scroll
through the on-screen menu until
the word INSTALL is highlighted.
USB
IN
S-VIDEO
Y
Pr
1
C
SPDIF
L
AUDIO OUT
Pb
Back of TV
7
VIDEO
Press the MENU button on the
remote to show the on-screen
menu.
AUDIO IN
R
DVD-D OUT
IR
Y
Cable signal
coming from
Cable Company
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
1
important for the TV to know what type of
signal to look for (Cable TV or an Antenna).
In the AUTO mode, when the AUTO PROGRAM feature is activated, the TV will automatically choose the correct mode.
1
2
3
CABLE
IN
AV out
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
NOTE: When using additional accessories, only one
external source will be audible, as there is only one
set of sound inputs. Component Video (CVI) input
will dominate over all other inputs, including S-Video
(S-VHS) and AV. When S-Video (S-VHS) is used, it
will dominate over the AV input.
he TUNER MODE control allows you to
T
change the TV’s input signal to either
ANTENNA, CABLE, or AUTO mode. It’s
1
2
TO
TV/VCR
R
Turn the VCR and the TV ON.
12
Cable Box (w/RF In/Outputs):
This connection will be mono.
Connect the Cable Company
supplied cable to the signal IN(put)
plug on the back of the Cable Box.
Using a separate round coaxial cable,
Jack Panel Back of Cable Box
connect one end to the OUT(put)
(TO TV) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
75 ⍀
Connect the other end of the
round coaxial cable to the 75Ω
input on the back of the television.
Screw it down finger tight.
Round 75Ω
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: If applicable, set the OUTPUT
Coaxial Cable
CHANNEL SWITCH on the back of the
cable box to CH 3 or 4.Tune the TV to the
same channel and change channels at the
cable box. In some cases, the cable box will Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs):
automatically tune to either channel 3 or 4,
24
change channels until the picture appears.
Cable Box (w/Audio/Video Outputs): Cable Signal IN
from the Cable
This connection will supply Stereo sound.
Company
Connect the Cable Company
Cable Box with A/V Outputs
supplied cable to the cable signal
IN(put) plug on the back of the
Cable Box.
Using a RCA type Video Cable, connect one end of the cable to the
Audio Cables
Video (or ANT, your cable box may be
Video Cable
L (White) & R (Red)
labeled differently) Out jack on the
(Yellow)
cable box and the other end to the
AV1 Video Input on the TV.
Connect one end of the Audio Left
and Right Cable to the left and
right Audio Out L & R jacks on
the cable box. Connect the other
end to the AV In Audio L & R Input
jacks on the TV.
Jack Panel Back of TV
NOTE: Use the AV button on the TV
remote control to tune to the AV channel
for the cable box signal. Once tuned, change
channels at the cable box, not the television.
75‰
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
S-VIDEO (S-VHS) INPUT CONNECTIONS
Connect one end of the SVIDEO CABLE to the S-VIDEO
jack on the back of the TV.Then connect one end the AUDIO (red and
white) CABLES to the AV In AUDIO
L and R (left and right) jacks on the
rear of the TV.
CABLE BOX CONNECTIONS
I
Antenna Connection
Example of Antenna Grounding
as per NEC - National Electric Code
AUDIO
HOW TO USE THE LANGUAGE CONTROL
or French and Spanish speaking TV
owners an onscreen LANGUAGE option
is present.With the LANGUAGE control you
can set the TV’s on-screen menu to be
shown in English, French, or Spanish.
18.
Tilt/Stability - All televisions must comply with recommended
international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of
its cabinet design.
• Do not compromise these design standards by applying excessive
pull force to the front, or top, of the cabinet which could ultimately
overturn the product.
• Also, do not endanger yourself, or children, by placing electronic
equipment/toys on the top of the cabinet. Such items could unsuspectingly fall from the top of the set and cause product damage
and/or personal injury.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be
mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Power Lines - An outdoor antenna should be located away from
power lines.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna is
connected to the receiver, be sure the antenna system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up
static charges.
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984,
provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding connectors, location of antennadischarge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements
for the grounding electrode. See Figure below.
Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that
objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure
through openings.comply with recommended international global safety standards for tilt and stability properties of its cabinet design.
Battery Usage CAUTION - To prevent battery leakage that
may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit:
• Install all batteries correctly, with + and - aligned as marked on
the unit.
• Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.).
• Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time.
1
Y
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
5
POWER Button
Press to turn the TV on or off.
VOL
11.
12.
17.
NOTE: The accessory device must have an
S-VIDEO OUT(put) jack in order for you to
complete the connection on this page.
All the AV channels can be selected by
pressing the Channel + or – buttons.
The AV channels can also be added to
the QuadraSurf™ buttons for quick
access.
10
10.
he S(uper)-Video connection on the rear
of the TV can provide you with better picture detail and clarity for the playback of
accessory sources such as DBS (digital broadcast satellite), DVD (digital video discs), video
games, and S-VHS VCR (video cassette
recorder) tapes than the normal antenna picture connections.
udio and Video Side Inputs are available
for a quick connection of a VCR, to playback video from a camera, or attach a gaming device. Use the AV button on the remote
control to tune these inputs.
Pr
Video Cable
(Yellow)
9.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong.
The wide blade or third prong are provided for your safety.When
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the appara
tus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for
long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required
when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain
or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
This product may contain lead and mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A.
The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B.
Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
C.
The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D.
The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E.
The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
6
T
A
2
AV In
CVI
SIDE AV CONNECTIONS
5
1
Back of TV
AV Out
8.
s
P.S. To get the most from your PHILIPS
purchase, be sure to complete and return
your Product Registration Card at once.
AV (AUDIO/VIDEO) INPUT CONNECTION
AUTO SOUND Button
Press repeatedly to choose from different factory pre-defined sound settings. Choose from
Personal (how you set the Sound Menu
options),Voice (for programming with speaking
only), Music (for musical type programs such as
concerts), or Theatre (used when watching
movies).
MUTE Button
Press the mute button to eliminate the sound
being heard from the TV. “MUTE” will be displayed on the TV’s screen. Press again to
restore the TV’s volume to it’s previous level.
t
As a member of the PHILIPS “family,” you’re entitled to
protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industry.What’s more, your purchase guarantees you’ll
receive all the information and special offers for which
you qualify, plus easy access to accessories from our
convenient home shopping network.
3121 235 22411- English
SMILEY Button
Press to add channels to the “QuadraSurf”
lists. Works with all colored buttons.
VOL(ume) + or - Buttons
Press the VOL + button to increase the TV’s
sound level. Press the VOL – button to
decrease the TV’s sound level.
This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may
cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do
not remove product covering.
The “exclamation point” calls attention
to features for which you should read
the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, this apparatus should not be
exposed to rain or moisture and objects filled
with liquids, such as vases, should not be
placed on this apparatus.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, match
wide blade of plug to wide slot, fully insert.
ATTENTION: Pour éviter les choc électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la
fiche dans la borne correspondante de la
prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Thank you for your confidence in PHILIPS.You’ve
selected one of the best-built, best-backed products
available today.We’ll do everything in our power to
keep you happy with your purchase for many years to
come.
Serial No.:
AV Button
Press to select an accessory signal input from
the front AV Inputs.
CC Button
Press to activate the Closed Captioning
options. Repeatedly pressing the CC button
will scroll the available options on the TV
screen.
Dear PHILIPS product owner:
Model No.:
QUADRASURF Buttons
(Red, Green,Yellow, Blue) Allows you to store
and surf up to 10 channels you choose for
each colored button.
MENU Button
Press to display the on-screen menu. Also can
be used to back out of the on-screen menu
until it disappears from the TV’s screen.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
HELPFUL HINT
2. Place the batteries (2-AA) in
the remote. Be sure the (+) and () ends of the batteries line up correctly (inside of case is marked.)
9
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks
for investing in a PHILIPS product.
4
T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CAUTION
Congratulations on your purchase,
and welcome to the “family!”
Most importantly, you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction.
he TV’s audio/video input jacks are for
direct picture and sound connections
between the TV and a VCR (or similar device)
that has audio/video output jacks. Follow the
easy steps below to connect an accessory
device to the AV In Input Jacks located on the
back of the TV.
Press the POWER button
to turn the TV ON.
Note:You can also press any
button on the front of the TV
to turn the TV ON.
Pressing both buttons at the
same time will display the onscreen menu. Once in the menu,
use these buttons to make adjustments or selections.
3
4
Subject
Panel No.
AutoPicture™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
AutoSound™ Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Basic Television Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Cable Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Channel Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Closed Captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Format Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Language Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Picture Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
QuadraSurf™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27-28
Remote Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Remote Control Button Descriptions 9-10
Sleeptimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Sound Menu Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tuner Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
safetysymbols
Read your Quick Use Guide and/or
Owner's Manual first for quick tips
T using your Philips product
thatR
make
AR Ê more enjoyable.
If you have read your instructions
and still need assistance,
you may access our online help at
www.usasupport.philips.com
or call
LTO
A1-888-PHILIPS
(744-5477)
while with your product
(and Model / Serial number)
31
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read before operating equipment
Know these
Need help fast?
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
21
By registering your product,
you'll receive notification directly from the manufacturer in the rare case of a product
recall or safety defect.
Registering your product guarantees that you'll receive all of the
privileges to which you're entitled, including special money-saving offers.
STOP
PANEL
26
*Product Safety
Notification
*Additional Benefits of
Product Ownership
Thank you for choosing Philips.
29
24
PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL
19
Return your Product Registration Card today
to get the very most from your purchase.
PANEL
9
8
27PT5445/37
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the CHANNEL
EDIT options.
With the CHANNEL EDIT
options displayed, and CHANNEL
NO. highlighted; you can use the cursor buttons to scroll through all available channels that you wish to add
(skipped OFF) or delete (Skipped ON)
from the TV’s memory.You can also
use the NUMBERED buttons to go
directly to a specific numbered channel that you want to add or skip. Or,
you can also use the CH+ or CH- to
quickly scan through the channels that
have not been skipped.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
2
4 9
1
2
4
7
6
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
More...
VOL
3
5
8
6
8
Install
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Language
Tuner Mode
Auto Program
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
12
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
On
Channel Edit
Channel No.
Skipped
Off
Using the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button, scroll the menu to highlight the
word SKIPPED.
Now use the CURSOR RIGHT
˙ to toggle between ON or
OFF. If ON is selected the channels
is skipped when scrolling channels
with the CH+ or CH- buttons. If OFF
is selected the channels is not skipped
when scrolling channels with the CH+
or CH- buttons.
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
HELPFUL HINTS
An “X” appearing in front of
any channel will indicate that
channel has skip on.When the
CH + or CH - buttons are
used, those channels will be
skipped.
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
L03 English.qxd 4/25/05 7:20 PM Page 2
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or
LEFT 1 buttons until the darkest
parts of the picture are as bright as
you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL - Press the
CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1
buttons to add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL - Press
the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT
1 buttons until lightest parts of the
picture show good detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL - CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to improve detail in the picture.
TINT CONTROL - Press the
CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or
LEFT 1 buttons to select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM picture preferences. (NORMAL will keep the
whites, white; COOL will make the
whites, bluish; and WARM will make
the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or
LEFT 1 buttons to toggle the control On or OFF.The Contrast + control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
2
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
0
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
Clear All
1 3
2
6
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
Mono
or Stereo
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
3
Off
4
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
TV RATINGS
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
VOL
Remove Item? - Press
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
1
On
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
Blocking
On
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
4
2
4
1
3
VOL
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Confirm Code
XXXX
3
When finished, press the STATUS /EXIT button to remove the
menu from the TV’s screen.
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be
blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish
to block. Repeat step 9 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the
menu from the screen.
1
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
timer display will appear on the
screen.
2
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
1
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
4
26
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
CC Mute
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
1
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons until the
word FEATURES is highlighted.
1
2
3
1
2
Press the AUTO PICTURE button on the remote control.The current Auto Picture setting will be displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
VOL
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
1
Sleep 15
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Sleep 60
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
Y
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT 2 or the CURSOR LEFT 1 buttons on the
remote.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
1
3
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING, UNRATED, or NO RATING) menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
2
4
6
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Off
TV-Y
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button to enter the sub-menus for the TVY7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP 3 or DOWN 4
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
5
12
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to highlight the
words TV RATING.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
24
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
or LEFT 1 buttons to select one
of the two options 4:3 or Expand
4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
29
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR DOWN 4
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
1
3
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
4:3 Expand
Format
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP 3
or DOWN 4 buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
1
2
On
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
Press the CURSOR DOWN 4
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
Use the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button on the remote to turn the rating option ON or OFF.
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
T
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
12
1
2
3
23
T
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
28
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
5
1
4
On
QUADRASURF
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
MOVIE RATINGS
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
Off
Block All
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
4
22
3
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
On
or Off
Incr. Surround
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
VOL
2
3
R
AVL
T
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
L
Balance
Sound
When finished, press the STATUS/EXIT button to remove the
menu from the screen.
1
6
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to
select between Stereo or Mono settings. Note: If Stereo is not present
on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
Off
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT 2 button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
5
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
50
Treble
On
Contrast +
Press the CURSOR UP 3 or
DOWN 4 buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
AVL: (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT 2 or LEFT
1 buttons to turn the control On
or Off.When On,AVL will level out
the sound being heard when sudden
changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to
adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to
adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT 2
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT 2 or LEFT 1 buttons to
adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
50
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there
may come a time when you want to
block or clear all the channels at the same
time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 90
1
2
NOTES
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
Sleep 240
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
Sleep off
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
Sleep 120
VOL
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Sleep 180
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Off
T
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add additional channels (up to 10) to each of the
the SURF lists.
5
R
AVL
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
QUADRASURF
Press the COLORED Quadra
Surf button until the desired channel appears.The screen will display
the channel number with a colored
“Smiley” face to indicate the
Colored button it relates to.
1
4
VOL
4
L
Balance
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the Movie Industry
ratings.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
On
NOTE: If you ever forget your code,
the 0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default
and can be used to enter and create a
new access code.
2
3
22
3
Off
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
Press the SMILEY
button on
the remote control to ADD the
channel to one of the SURF lists.
7
SOUND: Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to select between Stereo or Mono
settings. Note: If Stereo is not present on a selected show and the TV is
placed in the Stereo mode, the sound
coming from the TV will remain in
the Mono mode.
50
Bass
T
Block All
Press the CHANNEL (+) or (–)
buttons (or the NUMBER buttons)
to select a channel to add to one of
the SURF lists.
6
50
Treble
Sound
If CLEAR ALL is selected, press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ button
to clear all blocked channels. All
channels will be viewable.
1
INCR. SURROUND: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to select between Incr.
Surround or Stereo settings (If
Stereo), or select Spatial or Mono (If
Mono).
ULTRA BASS: Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to turn Ultra Bass On or
Off. Ultra Bass will enhance the low
frequency sound.
Off
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to select
either CLEAR ALL or BLOCK ALL.
he QuadraSurf™ control allows you set
up four different personal channel Surf
lists using the colored buttons (on the
remote control), each holding up to ten
channels in its quick viewing“list.”
5
0
BLOCK/CLEAR ALL CHANNELS AT THE SAME TIME
27
T
AVL : (Auto Volume Leveler) Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to turn the control On or Off.When On,AVL will
level out the sound being heard when
sudden changes in volume occur during commercial breaks or channel
changes.
any times while watching movies from
a DVD player the image is shown in
“letter box” format.This is the format that
is shown in movie theaters. when shown on
a TV screen, the image will have areas of
black on top and bottom of the screen.
Treble
Bass
Balance
AVL
Incr. Surround
More...
BALANCE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the level of sound coming
from the left and right speakers.
Color
If BLOCK ALL is selected,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn the control ON or
OFF.When ON is selected, ALL
available channels will be blocked
from viewing.
3
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
BASS : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the low frequency sounds.
Clear All
2
1
2
3
4
THE 4:3 EXPAND FORMAT CONTROL
M
TREBLE: : Press the CURSOR
RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝ buttons
to adjust the control.The control will
enhance the high frequency sounds.
Brightness
fter blocking specific channels there may
come a time when you want to block or
clear all the channels at the same time.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
1
17
o adjust your TV sound, select and use the
Menu Controls listed below:
TSound
o adjust your TV picture controls, select a
channel and use the Picture Menu Controls
listed below:
T
1
SOUND MENU CONTROLS
Sleep 15
Sleep 30
Sleep 45
Sleep 60
Sleep 90
Sleep 120
1
2
VOL
Sleep 180
Sleep 240
2
Press the AUTO SOUND button on the remote control.The current Auto Sound setting will appear
in the middle of the screen.
Press the AUTO SOUND button repeatedly to toggle between
the four settings. (PERSONAL,
MUSIC, VOICE, or THEATRE)
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Sound Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
Personal
Voice
Music
Theatre
1
2
VOL
Sleep off
VOICE - Preset sound
options for programming
where heavy dialogue is present.
MUSIC - Preset sound
options for musical programming where there is little dialogue.
THEATRE - Preset sound
options for watching movies.
NOTES
32
NOTES
15
PICTURE MENU CONTROLS
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
Picture
Brightness
Color
Picture
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temp.
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until the
darkest parts of the picture are as
bright as you prefer.
COLOR CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttonsto add or eliminate color.
PICTURE CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons until lightest
parts of the picture show good
detail.
SHARPNESS CONTROL : Press
the CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or
LEFT ˝ buttons to improve detail
in the picture.
TINT CONTROL : Press the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or LEFT ˝
buttons to obtain natural skin tones.
COLOR TEMP CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttonsbuttons to
select NORMAL, COOL, or WARM
picture preferences. (NORMAL will
keep the whites, white; COOL will
make the whites, bluish; and WARM
will make the whites, reddish.)
CONTRAST + CONTROL :
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to toggle the
control On or OFF.The Contrast +
control helps to “sharpen” the picture
quality.The black portions of the picture become richer in darkness and
the whites become brighter.
21
A
50
65
50
Picture
50
Sharpness
50
Tint
Color Temp.
Normal
Warm
or
Cool
On
Contrast +
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Clear ?Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
Cleared
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
1 3
2
1
Press the FROWNIE
face
button again to confirm your
decision to remove the channel
from the Surf list.
Repeat steps 4-6 to remove other channels from Surf lists.
Incr. Surround
Spatial
or Mono
Incr. Surround
or Stereo
On
or Off
Ultra Bass
Mono
or Stereo
2
12
Select List!
12
12
Added!
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Movie Rating
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
12
3
Repeatedly pressing the same
COLORED button while the “smiley” face appears will tune all the programmed channels. Pressing the COLORED button again will return you to
the first channel in the list.
Remove Item? - Press
12
3
4
2
VOL
5
6
1
Repeat steps 1-3 for the other three
COLORED buttons (Surf lists) if
desired.
Any time the “smiley” face appears
with the channel number, pressing
the “frownie” face button will
allow you to remove it from the list
(see the previous page for more
details).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
or LEFT ˝ buttons to select
one of the two options 4:3 or
Expand 4:3.
4:3 - Standard format for the TV.
Expand 4:3 - Enlarges the picture
to fill out the entire screen area,
eliminating the “letter box” effect.
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to
remove the menu from the TV’s
screen.
4:3 Expand
Format
4:3
Expand 4:3
1
5
6
3
5
VOL
2
4
Note: The Expand 4:3 format can also
be activated using the CURSOR UP
˚ or DOWN ¸ buttons when the
onscreen menu is not being displayed.
Pressing these buttons will toggle the
standard 4:3 format and the Expand 4:3
format.
24
5
2
4
1
3
VOL
6
29
99
18
22
56
28
41
39
1
2
3
35
5
5
12
TV Rating
TV-Y
TV-Y7
TV-G
TV-PG
TV-14
TV-MA
Off
1
On
TV-Y
Block All, FV
TV-Y7
Remove Item? - Press
2
Off
TV-G
TV-PG
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-14
Block All, V, S, L, D
TV-MA
Block All, V, S, L
1
3
5
1
3
5
VOL
2
4
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
No Picture
• Check antenna connections. Are they properly secured to the TV's ANT 75Ω plug?
• Check the TUNER MODE control for the correct tuner setting.
• Try running the Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
• Press the AV button on the remote to make sure the correct signal source is selected (FRONT or Current Channel).
No Sound
• Check the VOLUME buttons.
• Check the MUTE button on the remote control.
• If you’re attempting to hook up auxiliary equipment, check the audio jack connections
located on the front of the TV.
Remote Does Not Work
• Check the batteries. If necessary, replace them with AA Heavy Duty (Zinc Chloride)
or Alkaline batteries.
• Clean the remote control and the remote control sensor window on the TV.
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
• Check to be sure the TV outlet is not on a wall switch.
TV Displays Wrong Channel or No Channels Above 13
• Repeat channel selection.
• Add the desired channel numbers (using the CHANNEL EDIT control) into the TV’s
memory.
• Check to be sure the TUNER MODES are set to the CABLE option and run the
Auto Program feature to find all available channels.
VOL
TV RATINGS
TV-Y -- Designed for a very young audience,
including children ages 2-6.
TV-Y7 -- It may be appropriate for children
age 7 and above who have acquired the development skills needed to distinguish between
make-believe and reality.
TV-G -- Suitable for most audiences, this type
of programming contains little or no violence,
no strong language, and little or no sexual dialogue or situations.
TV-PG -- This program contains material that
parents may find unsuitable for younger children. Could contain Moderate violence (V),
some sexual situations (S), infrequent coarse
language (L), or some suggestive dialogue (D).
TV-14 -- This program contains some material
that many parents would find unsuitable for
children under 14 years of age.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: intense violence (V), intense sexual situations (S), strong coarse language (L), or
intensely suggestive dialogue (D).
Unrated
On
No Rating
On
Blocking
On
Access Code
XXXX
Features
AutoLock
Format
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
XXXX
Incorrect
Features
AutoLock
Format
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
2
4
1
The screen will ask you to enter a
“New Code.” Enter a “new” 4
digit code using the NUMBERED buttons. The screen will
then ask you to CONFIRM the code
you just entered. Enter your new
code again.“XXXX” will appear
when you enter your new code and
then display the AutoLock™ menu
options.
New Code
----
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Confirm Code
XXXX
Using the NUMBERED buttons,
enter 0, 7, 1, 1. “XXXX” appears
on the Access Code screen as you
press the numbered buttons.
1
2
4
1
3
VOL
Press the CC button repeatedly
to choose from the four Closed
Caption options (CC Off, CC1,
CC2, CC Mute).
•
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to turn blocking ON or
OFF for that channel.When ON is
selected the channel will be blocked.
3
Press the CH + or CH – button
to select other channels you wish to
block. Repeat step 2 to block the
new channel.
4
When finished, press the
STATUS/EXIT button to remove
the menu from the screen.
2
2
4
1
26
tion of receipt can be provided.
A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes).
Products sold AS IS or RENEWED.
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN THE
U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN
ISLANDS…
Contact Philips Customer Care Center at:
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477)
TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE IN
CANADA…
1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking)
1-888-PHILIPS (1-888-744-5477) - (English
or Spanish
Speaking)
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
THE CONSUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PRODUCT. EXCEPT
TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS
PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, or allow
limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to you. In
addition, if you enter into a service
contract agreement with the PHILIPS
partnership within ninety (90) days of
the date of sale, the limitation on how
long an implied warranty lasts does not
apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province.
Philips, P.O. Box 671539, Marietta, GA. 30006-0026
(Warranty: 4835 710 27400)
OffStop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
On
Enter your
Access Code to
view a tuned
channel that is
blocked with
Block Channel.
1 4
3
5
6
7
VOL
2
3
AUTO PICTURE
hether you’re watching a movie or a
sporting event, your TV has automatic
video control settings matched for your current program source or content.
W
CC Off
CC Off
CC1
CC2
1
CC Mute
1
2
3
2
VOL
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button on the remote control.The
current Auto Picture setting will be
displayed on the screen.
Press the AUTO PICTURE
button repeatedly to select either
PERSONAL, MOVIES, SPORTS,
WEAK SIGNAL, or MULTIMEDIA
picture settings.
Personal
Movies
Sports
Weak Signal
Multimedia
1
2
VOL
NOTE: The way you choose to set the
Picture Menu Controls will become your
PERSONAL setting.
MOVIES - Preset picture options
for watching Video Tapes, or
DVDs.
SPORTS - Preset picture
options for watching sporting
events.
WEAK SIGNAL - Preset picture options for watching programs where the reception is not
at its best.
MULTIMEDIA - Preset picture
options for use with video gaming.
AUTO SOUND
he Auto Sound feature allows the listener to select between four different factory set sound options.
T
Press the SLEEP button on the
remote control and the SLEEP
OFF display will appear on the
screen.
1
Sleep Off
Press the SLEEP button repeatedly to pick the amount of time
(15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or 240
minutes) before the TV will turn
itself off.
31
Channel 12
Blocked By AutoLock
Channel Blocking
Access Code
----
VOL
When finished, press the
STATUS /EXIT button to remove
the menu from the TV’s screen.
NOTE: An on-screen count down will
appear during the last minute before the
TV shuts itself off. If any button is
pressed during the last minute of the
countdown, the Sleeptimer setting will
be cancelled.
•
1
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCK CHANNELS are
highlighted.
AutoLock
Block Channel
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
NOTE: If you ever forget your code, the
0, 7, 1, 1 code is the factory default and
can be used to enter and create a new
access code.
CLOSED CAPTIONING
Press the CC button on the
remote to display the current Closed
Caption setting.
fter your personal access code has been
set (see previous page), you are now
ready to select the channels or the A/V
Inputs you want to block out or censor.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
Block Channel
“INCORRECT CODE” will
appear on the screen, and you will
need to enter 0, 7, 1, 1 again.
7
Features
AutoLock
Format
Access Code
----
Y
90 Days Labor & One (1) Year Parts & Two (2) Years Display
EXCLUDED FROM WARRANTY COVERAGE
Your warranty does not cover:
• Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems
outside of the product.
• Product repair and/or part replacement because of
improper installation, connections to improper voltage supply, abuse, neglect, misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control
of Philips.
• A product that requires modification or adaptation
to enable it to operate in any country other than
the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of
products damaged by these modifications.
• Damage occurring to product during shipping when
improperly packaged or cost associated with packaging.
• Product lost in shipment and no signature verifica-
Features
AutoLock
Format
BLOCK CHANNELS
A
SLEEPTIMER
PHILIPS LIMITED WARRANTY
DISPLAY: For a period of two (2) years from the date
of purchase, Philips will supply, at no charge, a new or
rebuilt active display device in exchange for the defective display. Philips authorized service centers will provide removal and installation of the parts under the
specified labor warranty.
5
6
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the word
FEATURES is highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the FEATURES
menu options.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words AUTOLOCK™ are highlighted.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button. The screen will read,
“ACCESS CODE - - - - .”
our TV can be set to automatically turn
itself off at a given amount of time.
When highlighted, each feature can
be turned ON or OFF using the
CURSOR RIGHT ˙ or the
CURSOR LEFT ˝ buttons on
the remote.
PARTS: For a period of one (1) year from the date of
purchase, Philips will supply at no charge, new or rebuilt
replacement parts in exchange for defective parts.
Philips authorized service centers will provide removal
and installation of the part under the specified labor
warranty.
1
2
3
4
3
4
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the desired feature.
LABOR: For a period of ninety (90) days from the date
of purchase, Philips will repair or replace the product, at
its option, at no charge, or pay the labor charges to any
Philips authorized repair facility. After the period of
ninety (90) days, Philips will no longer be responsible
for charges incurred.
Timer
Start Time
Stop Time
Channel
Activate
Display
First, let’s start by learning how to set a personal access code:
1
2
1
3
NO RATING: ALL programming with
NO content advisory data can be
blocked if set to ON and the BLOCKING feature is set to OFF.
COVERAGE:
(If the product is determined to be defective)
Features
AutoLock
Format
AutoLock
Format
losed Captioning (CC) allows you to
read the voice content of television programs on the TV screen. Designed to help
the hearing impaired, this feature uses onscreen “text boxes” to show dialogue and
conversations while the TV program is in
progress.
AutoLock
Setup Code
Clear All
Block All
Movie Rating
TV Rating
Block Options
UNRATED: ALL unrated programs
based on the Movie Ratings or Parental
(TV) Guidelines can be blocked if this feature is set to ON and the BLOCKING
feature is set to OFF.
PROOF OF PURCHASE: You must have proof of
the date of purchase to receive warranted repair on the
product. A sales receipt or other document showing the
product and the date that you purchased the product as
well as the authorized retailer included, is considered
such proof.
Main
Picture
Sound
Features
Install
20
C
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Blocking
Options (BLOCKING,
UNRATED, or NO RATING)
menu.
PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS warrants
this product against defect in material or workmanship,
subject to any conditions set forth as follows:
ver the next few panels you’ll learn how
to block channels and get a better
understanding of the rating terms for certain
programming.
O
25
BLOCKING OPTIONS
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons until the
words BLOCKING OPTIONS
are highlighted.
30
SETTING UP AN ACCESS CODE
Proceed to the next panel to learn more...
BLOCKING: Might be called the “master switch” for AutoLock™.When ON,
ALL blocking/censoring will take place.
When OFF,ALL blocking is disabled.
3
4
19
TV-MA -- This program is specifically designed
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be
unsuitable for children under 17.This type of
programming contains one or more of the following: graphic violence (V), explicit sexual situations (S), or crude indecent language (L).
utoLock™ offers the viewer other blocking features as well.With these Blocking
Options, the censoring can be turned ON or
OFF.
Once you’ve entered your access code and
the AutoLock™ features are displayed on
the screen:
No Power
• Check the TV power cord. Unplug the TV, wait 10 seconds, then reinsert the plug
into the outlet and push the POWER button again.
• Check that the outlet is not on a wall switch.
• Be sure the fuse is not blown on the AC power strip, if one is being used.
12
10
MOVIE RATINGS Continued
R: Restricted - This is programming is specifically designed for adults. Anyone under the age
of 17 should only view this programming with
an accompanying parent or adult guardian.
NC-17: No one under the age of 17 will
be admitted. - This type of programming
should be viewed by adults only.
X:Adults Only - This type of programming
contains one or more of the following: very
graphic violence, very graphic and explicit or
indecent sexual acts, very coarse and intensely
suggestive language.
A
4
If the TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA
sub-menu is accessed, press the
CURSOR UP ˚ or DOWN ¸
buttons to select one of the options
(Block All,V, S, L, D, or FV).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
option ON or OFF.
he AutoLock™ feature is an integrated circuit that receives and processes data sent by
broadcasters, or other program providers, that
contain program content advisories.When programmed by the viewer, a TV with AutoLock™
can respond to the content advisories and block
program content that may be found objectionable (such as offensive language, violence, sexual
situations, etc.).This is a great feature to censor
the type of viewing children may watch.
AutoLock™ offers various BLOCKING
controls from which to choose:
Access Code - An Access Code must be
set to prevent children from unblocking
questionable or censored programming set
by their parents.
Channel Block - After an access code has
been programmed, you can block individual
channels including the A/V inputs.
Clear All - Allows you clear all channels
being blocked from your viewing set with
the Channel Block Control.
Block All - Allows you to block ALL channels and A/V inputs at one time.
Movie Ratings - Certain blocking options
exist which will block programming based on
ratings patterned by the Motion Pictures
Association of America.
TV Ratings - Just like the Movie Ratings,
programs can be blocked from viewing using
standard TV ratings set by TV broadcasters.
MOVIE RATINGS
G: General Audience - All ages admitted.
Most parents would find this program suitable for all ages.
PG: Parental Guidance Suggested - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for younger children.
PG-13: Parents Strongly Cautioned - This
programming contains material that parents
may find unsuitable for children under the age
of 13.
TV RATINGS
NOTE: Some TV RATING options also have
sub-ratings.The ratings of TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV14,TV-MA can be customized to block V (violence), FV (fantasy violence), S (sexual situations), L (coarse language), or D (suggestive
dialogue).
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the TVY or TV-G rating ON or OFF. Or,
press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to enter the sub-menus for the
TV-Y7,TV-PG,TV-14 or TV-MA ratings.
1
3
If the “smiley” face disappears from the
screen and the same COLORED button is
pressed, the surf channels will be displayed
starting with the FIRST programmed channel again.
4
5
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Format is
highlighted.
3
Off
QUADRASURF
2
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the Features
menu options (AutoLock or
Format).
1
2
On
Use the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button on the remote to turn the
rating option ON or OFF.
While the colored “smiley” face
still appears on the screen, press
the same COLORED button on
the remote to tune the second channel programmed for that specific surf
list.
Press the CURSOR DOWN ¸
button until the word Features
is highlighted.
Once you’ve entered your access code and the
AutoLock™ features are displayed on the
screen:
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words TV RATING.
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the TV RATING
options (TV-Y,TV-Y7,TV-G,TV-PG,
TV-14, or TV-MA).
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight any
of the TV Rating options. When highlighted, all these options can be turned
ON (which will allow blocking) or OFF
(which will allow viewing).
G
PG
PG-13
R
NC-17
X
G
When a rating level is chosen to be
blocked, any higher level rating will also
be blocked from viewing. (i.e.: If “R” is
selected to be blocked, NC-17 and X
will automatically be blocked.)
1
6
4:3
he AutoLock™ feature can block programming based on the TV Industry ratings.
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
any of the Movie Rating options.
When highlighted, all these options
can be turned ON (which will allow
blocking) or OFF (which will allow
viewing).
Press one of the pre-programmed COLORED buttons on
the remote (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue).The screen will display a smiley
face with the first programmed channel for that surf list.
4
5
Features
AutoLock
Format
T
Press the CURSOR RIGHT ˙
button to display the MOVIE
RATING options (G, PG, PG-13, R,
NC17, or X).
Assuming channels have now been added to
the four Quadra Surf lists (the four colored
buttons, see the previous page), let’s review
how the feature works.
1
2
3
UNDERSTANDING AUTOLOCK CONTROLS
18
T
Press the MENU button on the
remote to display the on-screen
menu.
23
MOVIE RATINGS
he Quadra Surf buttons on your remote
control allow you to store up to 10 channels per button (40 total).You can even program the A/V Input channels for each button
making them a “source” button.
To remove a channel from one of
the SURF lists;
6
Incr. Surround
Press the CURSOR UP ˚ or
DOWN ¸ buttons to highlight
the words MOVIE RATING.
28
Press the corresponding COLORED (Red, Green,Yellow or
Blue) button to add the channel to
that button’s Surf list. (Up to ten
channels per button can be stored.)
While the “Smiley” face channel indicator is displayed, press
the FROWNIE
face button.
The screen will read, “Remove item?
- Press
.”
On
or Of